Home

2009 Jeep JK Wrangler OM - Muddy Buddys Jeep Wrangler Club

1. is u 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 11 Plastic Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top
2. Mb ights 2 5 ve cae oe eee Renee 95 Intermittent Wiper System a0 14 ue 100 Multifunction Lever 0000 95 Windshield Washers 000 101 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And Mist Feat re sis 3 ove rer ede 101 E a doe aa ees irs ia B Tilt Steering Column saena sr ER e 101 HEN CR REA neta nen seen ies Te ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 102 HESHUEDUDIHUSE OMNE s ia d To Activate ce 102 Flash Io Pass e x ene ee Gs 97 To Set At A Desired Speed 000005 103 Front Fog Tipe I Equipped ise iS pag d To Deactivate 6 na maait sa ai h 103 Tumi Signals 2 9s perso RE RET RA s 97 To Resume Speed noo see 103 Dayne Bee ie A eye ice Gua i To Vary The Speed Setting issus 103 iit cee qi be cid np ae Manual Transmission 104 me eS rnel SIDES nie Wasi aca sted es ad To Accelerate For Passing 105 Windshield Wiper Operation 99 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Bi Electrical Power Outlet 00 4 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off ll Cupholders Rear Storage Compartment E Dual Top If Equipped Removing The Soft Top Installing The Soft Top ll Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Panel s Removal Front Pa
3. 3 8L Manual 4 10 2 Door Rubicon 6 236 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 829 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Automatic 4 10 2 Door Rubicon 6 281 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 849 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door X 5 121 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 2WD 2 323 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door X 7 621 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 2WD 3 457 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 4 Door X 7 647 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 2WD 3 469 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 4 Door Sahara 7 803 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 2WD 3 539 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door X 5 325 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 415 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door X 7 825 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 4WD 3 549 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 4 Door X 7 825 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 4WD 8 549 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 354 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door Sahara 5 481 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 486 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door Sahara 7 981 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model AWD 3 620 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 4
4. Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect JEBqinpped seus erm reet Rn Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 0 0 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna 0 0 0 0 0005 Reception Quality Operating Instructions Satellite Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone It Equipped 5 e 244 044 0005 SGu dae nes Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES Hf Equipped scet rater rrr ea E CD DVD Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 H Climate Controls os sas G04 TOS CE SOR 247 Air Conditioning seser wss creerii est 253 Manual Heater Only 04 247 Operating TIPS xe aaa Ced ded e e 254 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System If Equipped
5. Rubicon Models Bl Rear Axle Lock 4WD Non Rubicon Models If Equipped sss ce RR ll Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect Tf Equipped eue Rer des ll On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips Side Step Removal If Equipped 284 The Basics Of Off Road Driving 284 When To Use 4L Low Range 285 Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation set oy aes he E No ee ees 285 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 286 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Point 2 eee Fe OE eae eae Ra was 287 Hill Climbing ess 22244444 rek Shoe ad riti 290 Driving Through Water 292 After Driving Off Road 295 B Power Steering i i oie rr pes 296 Power Steering Fluid Check 297 WM Parle Brake qoaa repet danai XR EP eR 298 en STARTING AND OPERATING 259 H Anti Lock Brake System 5 eoe sn 299 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 321 li Electronic Brake Control System 3001 W Tires General Information 325 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 301 Tife Pressure ce 246 03 a Sardine dba ete 325 TCS Traction Control System 302 Tire Inflation Pressures 04 326 BAS Brake Assist System 303 Tire Pressures F
6. 380 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 380 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Progr ms see 381 B Replacement Parts s ecu e RR ER 382 H Dealer Service 0 ens 383 Bl Maintenance Procedures 04 383 Engine OI sedo wanna a Beas a ae 383 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication 00 0 Windshield Wiper Blades Windshield And Rear Window Washers Exhaust System llle Cooling System less Brake System 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission 398 W Bulb Replacement e nn 418 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Head Light est pa ande amare abel 418 Trans MISSIO vesc dd oer ween tas 401 Front Park Turn Signal 000 00 00 419 PA A QI derpi iM qa oe Front Side Marker Loos wwe thea cea 419 Transfer Case scr isa ve eee as ea 402 Front Fog Light cce 420 Front Rear Axle Fluid Lus 402 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Maintenance After Off Road Driving 403 LiplitSu cus eroe metuat ohne le rtu Viens 420 Appearance Care And Protection From Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 421 n A a A idi la Fluid
7. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear drive shaft is removed See your authorized dealer or refer to the Service Manual Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage 362 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing 4WD Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral for recreational towing Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Turn the engine off 2 Depress brake pedal 3 Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 4 Shift transfer case lever into N Neutral 5 Start the engine 6 Shift automatic transmission into DRIVE or manual transmission into gear 7 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 8 Shut the engine off and place the ignition key into the ACC position 9 Shift automatic transm
8. 209 Emergency Brake se as ae Oe d 298 Emergency In Case of JACKING paesane e dinge Rs depre Rd 368 J mp Star ng 6i ea ct entire E Pues 373 Tow HOOKS i36 koe Rem aX ba eo 375 Emission Control System Maintenance 381 426 Engine Air Cleaner 2 45 2202 95499929 044 4060 386 Block Heater llle 265 Break In Recommendations aa 75 Compartment secre rerien Hi pea aes 379 Compartment Identification 379 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 76 343 Fails to Start s e oda hak IN ott 262 Flooded Starting 460 INDEX ae Fuel Requirements 0 340 422 Jump Starting 6 ee 373 Oil ssh os Oboe ERO RET Gg EC E 383 422 Oil Disposal i i ere RE Ret BES 385 Oil Filter ix ae RU kee ek ROS RC 385 OibSelection cs quoe gr hod ere C ROO e 422 Overheating iaces Re m he eee er ente 366 MATIN slab e hong side P nad ree 261 Temperature Gauge 0 0 eee eee eee 202 Engine Oil Viscosity i205 949 4440 eS 384 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 384 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 59 Entry System Illuminated 19 Event Data Recorder less 60 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 76 343 Exhaust System 6 0 6 cee eee 389 Extender Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 0 000 cee 50 Exterior Finish Care 0 0 0 0 0 eee nee 404 Fabric Caf sie Re e caves 406 407 408 Fabric Top asi iy dates REND Er ihe 408 Filte
9. HSA on Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch position To prevent this do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and co
10. 9 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 10 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm towards the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 11 To install the side windows affix the window tem 12 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 13 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 14 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should b
11. Remote Side Equipped Impact Acceleration Sensors If e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning ar Light for six to eight seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag s
12. TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner s Manual concern ing vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacit
13. g ASCAP indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged CHANgE OIL indicates that the engine oil should be changed ESPOFF indicates that ESP is turned off and no FUSE indicates that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power Module LoW tIrE indicates low tire pressure will display in the odometer Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when y
14. mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum de fogging select the Outside Air position NOTE The Recirculate mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MAX A C For maximum cooling select ei ther the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Then press the A C and the Recir culate buttons so that both lamps are illuminated and set the tem perature control to its coolest set y 81cab384 ting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e Refer to Recirculation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
15. 02000005 399 Fluid Typ i kk rm 398 Gear Ranges ine cime e XL RR RORLATEU A 271 Shif hg 6 kee ee ee hae e eee ee 271 Special Additives 000000 400 Torque Converter 2 6 2c eee eee 274 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 105 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0 00 105 en INDEX 457 Axle Lock ceres searr nne ae weit Aes 279 280 Battery scel 44547 ties meen eens ye EE ed 386 Emergency Starting 6 0 eee eee 373 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Pelt Seat ites cag Aedes ee eae pe 41 Body Mechanism Lubrication 388 Brake Assist System 0 000 000 0 eu 303 Brake Assist Warning Light 208 Brake Control System Electronic 301 Brake System qe ica anda apada dine ane enr ate 397 Anti Lock ABS 1 0 2 0 0 0000 ee eee 299 301 Master Cylinder 25536293 e804 cab Ee 398 Parking isse meme RR E eR a RR 298 Warning Light eeesss 199 Brake Transmission Interlock 269 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Bulb Replacement 0 050 417 418 Capacities Fluid siseses ose eee eevee ca tes 422 Caps Filler Fuel esseen e Ru RE REA PYSTSESLYA 344 Power 5teering 241 ue dete eet 297 Car Washes edocet RR US ICE AU 404 Carbon Monoxide Warning 343 Cargo Light 24k Re ich eoe Re dia eama ee 98 Cargo Vehicle Loading 4 346 Caution Exhaust G
16. Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 en STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location Four Door Models Tire Placard Location Two Door Models 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Tire and Loading Information Placard i SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 G THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC ARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg Q g 2 TIRE SPARE ORIGINAL TI P195 70R14 T125 70D15 H3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front
17. If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that yo
18. Jeep WRANGLER 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC e Copyright O 2008 Chrysler LLC SE
19. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 e Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Windows WASHING Use MOPAR Car Wash or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support top from underneath RINSING Be sure to remove all trace of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moi
20. supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press th
21. Be When you press this button a Not Equipped with UConnect message will display on your radio screen 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATS WARNING Front Seat Adjustment Move seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever Be sure the latch is fully engaged Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the handle on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat Push downward on the handle to lower the seat Manual Seat Adjustment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Seat Height Adjustment 81930938 tuse Front Seatback Recline Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position Recline Lever 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Push the lever on the seatback rearward toward the rear of the vehicle to tilt the entire seat forward Easy Entry Seat To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback i upright until it locks then push the seat rearward until Eas
22. Control Buttons Press and release the left button on the instrument cluster to access the computer displays Press and hold the left button on the instrument cluster for two to three seconds to switch from English to Metric displays Reset Press and hold the right button on the instrument cluster while function is being displayed to reset The following trip conditions can be reset e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa tion Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display This display
23. M 3 Turn rear L shaped lock located above shoulder belt 4 Turn rear fasteners knobs located on overhead anchorage speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they can be removed 81cd523e 81913300 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the To remove right panel follow steps above except for windshield Step 2 Front Panel s Installation NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order 6 Remove panel 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Installation Only With Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn left and right panels over and move spacer block located on rear of panel upward 90 degrees NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install right panel first then the left panel 3 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in thi
24. Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Head Light 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bul
25. Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type w a No program type or Ped None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Program Type 16 ee Program Type 16 x d Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty s
26. TPMS 204 Traction Control 22v rx 207 Turn Signal ns cee ee t Rm 97 199 419 420 Voltage ca gessie MR aia eh Big denm des 198 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 198 Loading Vehicle llle 346 Wifes gt 33 gk dorer 8 ES Gee eae PORE 321 Locking AXIE 4 ede Rn SOS 279 280 Locks NOOR PET MN 32 Power Door 32222293 4044 86 995 9248 das 33 steering Wheel 3 4 sui ase dk athe e woes DR 13 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EATGED upon won inr aie eure m obtu 68 69 Lubrication Body e ee ees 388 Maintenance Free Battery 04 386 Maintenance Procedures ills 383 Maintenance Schedule Ls 426 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 207 381 Manual Service llle 451 Manual Transmission ss 265 401 en INDEX 465 Fluid Level Check 0 0 00 000 eae 401 Lubricant Selection 0 0 00 00 eae 401 Shift Speeds seres r gi innsir psi nutid gees 266 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 398 Mini Trip Computer 04 209 210 Mirrors 2x4 gk AE Sad aw eee eae RED e ps 83 Outside i ualanme Edad hane PEE dd 84 Reatview uacua 40 RE TD enik d EPERE 83 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Modular Hard Top iso e e 115 Monitor Tire Pressure System 334 Mopat Part i4 eese s y ee rh ee ees 382 450 Multi Function Control Lever 95 New Vehic
27. cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The right side outlet has power available only when the ignition is ON This outlet will also operate a conven tional cigar lighter unit Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off WARNING e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life Power Outlets and or prevent engine starting The left side outlet is powered directly from the battery Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers power available at all times Items plugged into this vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine battery even more quickly Only use these inter starting mittently and with greater caution Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING Continued e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory br
28. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up unless side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the ve hicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the Hard Top 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top og On No is u 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 11 Plastic Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Qua
29. vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your e Two people should never be belted into a si
30. 16 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 19 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel 18 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 21 Open the doors and insert the top retainers into the 22 Ensure plastic retainer is tucked in properly at channels in the door frame above the doors starting at B pillar not pinching the seal the front and working toward the rear of the vehicle 81926539 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x 23 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF their secured position EQUIPPED NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle To Open 1 Insert finger behind the plastic re
31. 19 Cruise Indicator CRUISE This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 20 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 21 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire
32. 250 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS laa 81625955 1 Air Outlet 6 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Power Outlet 3 Horn 8 Lower Switch Bank 4 Radio 9 Auxiliary Power Outlet 5 Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81918b50 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light indicates the front fog lights are on 4 Low
33. AND OPERATING 311 mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP Off 4H Range Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running In this mode all ESP and TCS stability features are turned off except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Refer to Compass and Mini Trip Computer If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE e The ESP system will change to Partial Off mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode e The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out
34. Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 040 50 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 0000 e ee 62 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 75 W Safety Tips iioii ius edi tareis piis 76 nem Exhaust Gas os sies m e Ro e es 76 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle sig ber oid oF Ie Pieds 77 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 22er d ek MEX REMISE 78 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in the PARK position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY position Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START 3 Push the ignition key inward 4 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Manual Transmission If Equipped CAUTION 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY Ni An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves position Always remove the key from the ignition and lock 2 Push the ignition k
35. Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before en STARTING AND OPERATING 287 entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduc
36. Lubricant into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Natural J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Natural J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Green tem ABS Pump Feed ESP JZ 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Pink tem ABS Valve Feed ESP Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 18 Z Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Jo 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Fuse Fuse Green Feed Flex Fuel JA Z J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module Pink Relay Manifold Tun Pink ing Valve p 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Pink Yellow J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw J22 Spare Yellow IOD Main M1 15 Am
37. Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ooo M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adju
38. Step 16 while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage 8192597d ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 14 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid forward over 15 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider the Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only Models Only 81c65d28 16 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake lamp Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera When the top is completely down position the drip rails tion so they make a v shape this prevents damage to the soft top material 17 Tuck the fabric a bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any 18 Close front header latches portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 19 Remove door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 2 Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 Sail Panel 9 Front Ret
39. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 349
40. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still Release Bar Location maintain some rear seating room ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 NOTE To Fold Down the Rear Seat e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and reposition the front seat to its mid track position pull it towards you until the seatback releases e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Pull Strap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Raise the Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatb
41. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 12 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Light amp 3 After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual 13 Airbag Warning Light This indicator lights and remains lit for six to e on If the light does not come on for six to eight seconds stays on or comes on while driving eight seconds when the ignition is first turned have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped REAR This light indicates when the rear axle lock has Q been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi A tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the
42. YOUR VEHICLE M Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip sport bar covers UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 c Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug being
43. a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain and or more frequent downshifts auto transmission only may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati
44. ae haan PER eae ks 368 Swing Gate Rear sco sos ude Rr ea ee 38 General Information 0 000 325 HO 470 INDEX aaa High Speed ask ou cae ak em hank ees 328 Inflation Pressures 1 2 0 0 eee eee 326 Jacking sexo REALI RE RR 368 371 Load Capacity eces eig RR eders 321 322 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 334 Pressure Warning Light 204 Quality Grading s secen iea dta kaea 452 Radial 242229 hber bae di nidia des 329 Replacement i4 c esesed Der e RO ees ee 331 Rotation s voe eee RERO hae ace a ES 333 ALCL m 316 DIZES Lig nete ood ie 3B ene SG oS eG ddd edt 318 Spare Tir iussus cs enka RE E RES aces 369 Spinnig auci ris a EE ae a ed 329 Tread Wear Indicators 000 330 To Open Hood 1 eee 94 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 354 Torque Converter Clutch 0004 274 Tow Hooks Emergency 000000 375 TOWING oe owed eae ete ex ea ae ed 349 376 Disabled Vehicle isses 376 enc M rrr 352 Recreational 224 e n Lee eed 361 Weight secuen pe dos Rede ie e Rr deu 352 Trac Lok Rear Axle llli ess 278 Traction Control us cie ss isai puse d 302 Traction Control Light 00 207 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 315 Trailet TOWING i aie 2 aie nice m eM s hosei 349 Cooling System Tips 0000 361 HitcheS 4 29 BRE DARR miia as 340 351 Minimum Requirements isses 355 T
45. an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both knobs Repeat on the other side WARNING Door Frame Removal Four Door Models Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands 1 Unscrew and remove the two forward most door ae pot used frame attachment knobs 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the 4 Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame at upper front of the front door frame tachment knob on the rear door frame VS 3 Pull the frame towards you with your front hand to remove the frame from the vehicle e
46. and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be store
47. belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts WARNING properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate e Relying on the airbags alone
48. child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap hav
49. extended use the Hazard Warning Flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped shift transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down CAUTION an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to Driving with a hot cooling system could damage the engine cooling system and turning off the A C your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT removes this heat You can also turn the temperature H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act drops back into the normal range If the pointer asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat remains on HOT H and you hear continuous from the engine cooling system chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES gg JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment Refer to Storage in Section 3 of this e Getting under a jacked up v
50. high pressure To avoid risk of personal Air Conditioner Maintenance injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant For best possible performance your air conditioner or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer should be done by an experienced repairman at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres time sor Oil and Refrigerants and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges sh
51. in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where t
52. in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel and California ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is
53. in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film Special Care stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing a month En RT d M It
54. is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept CAUTION clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of similar cause which destroys the paint and protective paint and decals coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non
55. light goes out 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 18 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph
56. may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 mH fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system performance
57. noises are 208 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARKING BRAKE NOTE This vehicle is not equipped with a self adjusting parking brake system Refer to the Mainte nance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for proper maintenance intervals To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position automatic trans mission or REVERSE or 1st gear manual transmission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise en STARTING AND OPERATING 299 the load on the transmission locking mechanism may When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the make it difficult to move the shifter out of PARK curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an Am WARNUNG The parking brake should always be applied whenever e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav the driver is not in the vehicle ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage ANT
58. not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning 344 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon ADDING FUEL monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent c
59. of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range AWD Models ESP Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESP system will be in this mode In 4L range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 48 km h At 40 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 40 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 48 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position Th
60. of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel D63505163 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and shift a automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle ona jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the hazard warning flasher Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire jack and tools from stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack an
61. on the left side of Em the steering column Multifunction Lever 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Headlights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent down for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to NOTE the second detent for headlight operation r NM MM ion e Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process e If the driver s door is left open and the headlights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the headl
62. operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer
63. or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering w
64. pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Three Button RKE Transmitter 1 Lock 2 Unlock NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the Illuminated Entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press using the follow ing procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Swing Gate Press a
65. pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires o
66. problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and
67. rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount
68. removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL N and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or mo
69. restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the
70. tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the exces
71. the CAUTION exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device i r mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con ued operation of your vehicle with a severe verter will not require maintenance However it is im malfunction could cause the converter to overheat portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure resulting in possible damage to the converter and proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst vehicle damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it t
72. the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Upper Half Door Window Installation If 1 Grasp the half door window and pull upward Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver Upper Half Door Window ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 Unplug the wiring harness connector under instru ment panel by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous st
73. the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Section 7 of this manual It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehi cle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result
74. too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance a
75. towing sis structure or tires as safe as possible Safety chains must always be used between your Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmission shift the transmis sion into 1st gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before t
76. troller NGC Global M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Powertrain Engine Red Wireless Module Controller GPEC 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Red ASST Heater Venti Natural LOCK UNLOCK lation Air Condition MTRS ing Module HVAC MOD Headlamp Wash HDLP WASH Compass COMPAS e When installing the Integrated Power Module M35 10 Amp _ Heated Mirrors cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Red erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so M36 20 Amp Power Outlet may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Yellow Module and possibly result in an electrical system M37 10 Amp _ Anti Lock Brake Sys tarare Red tem ABS Electronic Continued Stability Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 CAUTION Continued e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes may result in a dangerous electrical system
77. type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram ER ze c EL XE ammer TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure T
78. up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position 6 Reinstall wiper arms 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The pushbutton is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on x 819179d2 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten CAUTION minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switc
79. vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e S meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion su
80. vehicle by pushing or towing Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Tow straps and chains may break causing serious If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are injury mounted in the front and the rear 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 8L 379 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII
81. while the engine is run ning the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 31 Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer later in this section 32 Compass Mini Trip Computer Button If Equipped Press this button to switch between the different functions 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED This feature located on the instrument cluster speedom eter and tachometer displays information on outside temperature compass direction and trip information
82. 12 Oy ikon cats enai oy hac ae deat ae asta 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illaminated Entty 244 ps0 bread Pied abe sy 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key lesse 14 Infant Restraint 2 2 6 6 6 vee be ig e ne 63 Inflation Pressure Tires 0040 326 Inside Rearview Mirror esses 83 Instrument Cluster csere iasi nesre ieat eee 197 Instrument Panel and Controls 196 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 408 Integrated Power Module Fuses 410 Interior Appearance Care 00000 407 Interior Lights 20044 244064 een Re m bs 98 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 100 Introduction ssec cae tea eee Re RE 4 Jack Location vee cip x hene Ra 368 Jack Operation 00000 368 370 371 en INDEX 463 Jacking Instructions s sss siine llle 370 Jump Starting eners sredi tay eee 373 Key Programming i cane ee res 16 Key Replacement 0 0 iian ee eee 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 14 Key In Reminder sc ose be ren 13 Keyless Entry System 34 3304 Pec ace bites 19 Keys ogrene icu acte ad See E as 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 199 Lap Beli i122 ge fs eke pi Pedace dee Mejia 41 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000000 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren iare RE RSS 68 69 Lead Free Gasoline llli 340 Lights 5 e rm Ea t RES 95 Airbag usarse e gru 60 201 Alarm 2
83. 29 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing LCOCUO Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
84. 2x RUE mee SER EG EX OR ds 202 Anti bock cues o E UR STR a 201 Anti Lock Warning 0000005 201 Back Up ass oeste domes des CS os 420 Brake Assist Warning 208 314 Brake Warning 6 eee eee 199 Bulb Replacement 42 2000 45 40 r 418 Care Lisuste see e RD ere CRDI etra s 98 Center Mounted Stop 200 421 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 207 CTUISE Em 203 Daytime Running 0 0 6 eee eee 97 Dimmer Switch Headlight 97 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator sae eiea aneia a a S Maes 207 208 314 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 209 Engine Temperature Warning 202 ln PEE Hazard Warning Flasher Headlight Switch 464 INDEX ae Headlights ie cae a Regem Rs es 418 High Beam quss sse de a eR ae ee RR dard 199 High Beam Indicator 200 199 Instrument Cluster 0 00000 cease 96 TENOR snes So ace x eb eon ea du dU DECRE REL 98 Lights On Reminder 4 500646 fea a0 96 Low Euel oS sar RERO eee f ER PEU 198 Oil Pressure 12592429 Ie 4109999914 P EGG 199 Passing iia a RR ate E RR Reina E 97 Rear Servicing ew eade na Ey Re eS 420 Rear Vail owas bau a E UO ES 420 Seat Belt Reminder 0 000000 199 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 202 Service cda ek Edo ERES UNES E o 418 Side Marker 22e e er e EX XA 420 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 202 Tire Pressure Monitoring
85. AL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure damage that results in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued Tire Inflation Pressures Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated Economy Improper inflation pressures
86. C When the outside tem perature is less than 40 F 40 C the display will show 40 F 40 C ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode AND P DISC GEIDVDSGHANGER MPS MA AUX NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC AACIS position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio mm Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons REQ Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM o
87. CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side airbags if equipped for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your
88. CTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION isos ose m e nm 66 ware US Rue alee Ram RU e Ore ie RR RV Sie ea RUN ane 6 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eeclesie 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc w ccc c mtn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece ccc e ccc eccceccececs 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 2c cece cece cree crc e cree erence EEn EENE EVER e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cece ccc cere eee e cee e eee hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4449954599499 93099 499 qo 246949500 dy p ota OS 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 5529999499 e ardua v e dux Tr r3 EY VR ves E 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cc cece ccc c cece cere ccc hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 xm a em X S RCRO Re 98 93 3 409 93 8 903 4093 4098 903 9 UR d nce Q3 ors 08 ote eus INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 00 00 00 000 4 WW Warnings And Cautions 00 0 8 l Rollover Warning 2 120060 Ree yor 5 W Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road
89. Cala nes Warnings and Cautions Warranty Information eec sree raeasg ke a Washer Adding Fluid 040 Washers Windshield Waxing and Polishing 00 Wheel Alignment and Balance 472 INDEX M Wheel and Wheel Trim less 406 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 406 Wheel Mounting 0 0 00 cee eee 372 Wind Buffeting 2 253 cect RR ete e RS 38 Window Fogging 0 000 c eee eee 254 WindOWS 393 ctu m a Bonn eR ete eR aS 36 POWOR 28 amp raean a A bg dn RU P ERE ERES 36 Windshield Folding 000004 183 Windshield Washers sss 99 389 Eh d 4 id oy aie Va ea RRO Rea Rae Reo 389 Windshield Wiper Blades 388 Windshield Wipers lt o si esteem Te 99 Wiper Rear exer e de ER ERROR ERE a 189 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 406 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be f
90. Capacities serie RR RR ER R89 422 BITUSGS sao sedo A epee obi da om li Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 423 Totally Integrated Power Module 410 PAGING ossa pia dud db HERR asi adi 423 Mi Vehicle Storage s n 417 Chassis LLL 424 ll Replacement Bulbs If Equipped 417 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L 1 Integrated Power Module 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Battery 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Engine Oil Fill 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authoriz
91. D OPERATING 267 Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H T 1102 2t03 3t04 4t05 51t06 gine 3 8L Accel 15 24 24 34 47 56 39 55 76 90 10 16 19 27 37 41 31 43 60 66 Speeds Cruise Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is depressed 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is depressed Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selec 6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2tol tion Maxi 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 mum Speed Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicl
92. Door Sahara 8 027 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model AWD 3 641 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Manual 4 10 4 Door Rubicon 8 059 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 4WD 3 655 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 4 10 4 Door Rubicon 8 104 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 4WD 3 676 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents porgazxser Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight STARTING AND OPERATING 355 e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everythin
93. FF position UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control right rotary knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution as identified by the symbols 81915f2a Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level v Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in tempera
94. Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT i g activated 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light A warning chime and an indicator light will alert you to buckle the seat belts When the belt is buckled the chime will stop but the light will stay on for about six seconds until it times out 8 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light 9 amp 7 This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that the headlights are on 7 7 high beam Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the h
95. Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor mm 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat build
96. HICLE Sx Standards The manufacturer also recommends that 1 WARNINGI you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Improper installation can lead to failure of an will use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may restraint in the front seat may be struck by a not work when you need it deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant Carefully follow the instructions that come with the All seating positions except for driver have a auto matic locking retractor The seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip For the seat Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety pass through the chi
97. Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 Sail Panel 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Plastic Retainer 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Insert finger behind the plastic retainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Repeat this on the opposite side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 4 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the 6 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in loops on the windshield 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearwar
98. I LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the REVERSE or 1st gear Failure to do so may allow driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse m braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be surfaces seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and the ignition A child could operate power win type and tires must be properly inflated to produce dows other controls or move the vehicle accurate signals for the computer 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regula
99. Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME OCO C O C 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the follo
100. NG SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Remote Starting System automatic transmission models only which will allow the vehicle to be started from distances up to approximately 300 ft 91 m away from the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood swing gate and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 81931ecc Remote Start RKE transmitter Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the REMOTE START button once The parking lights will remain illuminated to indicate that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is running The lights will turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote s
101. NG Se CAUTION soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely Cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing wate
102. ON In this situation the Tire Pressure 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the CAUTION Continued tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your NOTE vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care damage may result when using replacement and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire equipment that is not of the same size type and or failure or condition style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes Continued the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 e The TPMS is not a subst
103. OPARS Oil Filter P N 04105409AC Fuel Selection 87 Octane 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 426 Required Maintenance Intervals WM Maintenance Schedule 426 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL S
104. OPERATION COMMAND TRAC OR ROCK TRAC IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions 2H Two wheel drive high range 4H Four wheel drive high range N Neutral and 4L Four wheel drive low range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 4WD Shift Controls The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take
105. OUR VEHICLE 121 Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order NOTE The hard top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Also make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top DOOR FRAME WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Removal Two Door Models WARNING 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs two per side Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 81924c19 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for WARNING storage Store in a secure location Never store the door frames in your vehicle In
106. PANEL M ESP becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 27 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light O D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off The O D OFF button is located on the center console 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front 2 sway bar is disconnected 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake ESP Assist System BAS warning light in the in AS Strument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 for more information 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected
107. Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the Elec tronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The Electronic Speed Control system should be turned off when not in use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever towards you or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting Wh
108. RNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle sta
109. RTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING WARNING Continued e Ashoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck NOTE The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on injury A belt worn under the arm can cause until the driver s seat belt is buckled internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued ee THINGS TO KNO
110. Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GTW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 8L Manual 3 21 2 Door X 4 987 lbs 25 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 262 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 2 Door X 5 987 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 716 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 2 Door X 6 032 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 736 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 2 Door Sahara 5 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 342 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 2 Door Sahara 6 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 795 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 2 Door Sahara 6 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 795 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg es STARTING AND OPERATING 353
111. T In Gasoline Lecce suu 342 Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 354 Materials Added To Fuel o oo 342 SON eee ee duong dude qos idi Fuel System Cautions 343 OE M M ELE id Caton Monoxide Waring E on BM Adding Fuel i465 cose earr u eee ae xx 344 Towing 2WD Models 00000 361 Bae Ee CAD AGUAS niat Sateen te in Towing 4WD Models 5 362 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and depress the clutch pedal before starting ve hicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor 4WD Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to depress the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake be
112. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield 130401750 Adjusting Rearview Mirror 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s hs to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight e Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Outside Rearview Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect This feature is not available on two door or four door models SEEK SCAN Mo Ca ED MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELEGT TUNE SCROLL 81969789 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone When you press this button a Not Equipped with UConnect message will display on your radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone
113. To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmit ter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be
114. Towing in Section 5 of this manual for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes 316 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markin If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle oer 3 gt down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway DEDE 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Me
115. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch 81525332 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 10 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 11 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 13 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift unless the hard top is being installed To remove the the top swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 14 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the 15 Fol
116. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Removing Slack from Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out Four Door Models Only This feature is designed to lock the retractor whe
117. YSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHANGE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is neces sary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not moni
118. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into 1st gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water inges tion too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On 204 STARTING AND OPERATI
119. able station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass to
120. acement Keys s zxcbscesseX food 3 ae Rea ex 15 Replacement Patts ss iradas eiea a Sua iae s 382 Replacement Tires saoe metatesi EE RR sts 331 Reporting Safety Defects n annann 450 Restraint Head sia oie rapa 89 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 eee 62 67 Restraints Occupant 6 0 0 eee eee 40 Roll Over Warning 0 00 5 Rotation Tires eae ee meer E ac 333 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 78 Safety Defects Reporting 450 Safety Information Tire 00 316 Safety TIPS s 6s eacwan dx Race ea Roe god dios ite 76 Satellite Radio eee 241 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 243 Schedule Maintenance llle 426 Seat Belt Reminder less 48 Seat Belts c m dob waded RV ee PR ace R ES 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant Women setio de ses 49 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0005 62 72 Extender fst dr e eS LES 50 Front Seat 26040205405 Maeda eee exa X eS 41 Maintenance se n d c ee REG weg Rx 408 Pretensioners 0 0000 cece eee eee 48 Reminder uuu dag ow Se atow eres OR ERA 199 468 INDEX MM ri MEM CP TT 86 Adjustment uuu cat atin adie anne RU Habe hc s 86 Cleaning si2icescdemeccctaen padriki iinis 406 Easy Entty sve ee bene do etd Be bg 88 Fold and Tumble Rear 0 89 Head Restr
121. acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When install
122. ack is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both hood latches 81abdfOf Hood Latch Locate the handle in middle of the front end of the hood Insert your hand into gap between the hood and top of the grille and push the handle to the side to raise the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the handle Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood panel To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The lever is located
123. acket from the plug CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Front Cupholders NOTE The front cupholder insert is removable for cleaning 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Cupholders STORAGE The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center cOnEDIE Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock insert ignition key and turn To open press the latch and lift cover Rear Cupholders 818f55ba Center Console ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Rear Storage Compartment The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage com partment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on loop and twist 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in tray 3 Open rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M hard top are to be used independently R
124. ad bars It is typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control en STARTING AND OPERATING 351 also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Hitch Systems may not be com patible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional informa tion Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight
125. ad of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just st
126. adio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names wn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension mH e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisessi
127. ailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle
128. ainer Quarter Window 5 Plastic Retainer 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid rearward over Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only 5 Before attaching the header latches be sure that the top retainers above the door are not trapped between the top and the door frame 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows 8 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them latches to the door rails Sunrider Models Only by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 7 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches
129. aints llle 89 Height Adjustment llle 86 Rear Folding 4425x249 Seng asa mirets 92 Removal l l 91 92 Seatback Release 2 0 00 2c eee 87 Til sx bea curd era ubt eras Pa QR e i Cg 87 Security Against Theft eres siterer setier 18 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Oil ance eom eU eR oe 384 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 0 14 Sentry Key Programming llle 16 Sentry Key Replacement llus 15 Service Assistance llle 447 Service Contract sere reri trotier Eea 449 Service Manuals 0 0 00 eee eena 451 Setting the Clock 0 00 0 216 231 234 Shift Lock Manual Override 270 Shifting ous s Peas reru GOA Rana 269 Automatic Transmission 271 Manual Transmission 265 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 47 Shoulder Belts llle 41 Side AIDAS x vede c RS ERAT SS 57 Signals Turn 2e RR YS 97 199 419 420 Snow Chains Tire Chains 333 SOR TOP 2624 4 630040084 e EP dais ss 130 151 Spare Tire tii8 se eds Soin a eats at hee ugh 369 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 2 0 0 0 340 OW og had iad be wee oh eee ees Cabernet tn 384 Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Speedometer uu ep ere Cep Eee d a 198 Star hg iecore Ry ERES 261 en INDEX 469 Automatic Transmission sess 261 System Remote S
130. ak in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short time adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle windows fully open Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside the vehicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle On hardtop models keep the tailgate window closed when driving your vehicle On fabric top models do not drive with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also open This will prevent carb
131. an ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback pr
132. an cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rot
133. and one hex bolt 13 mm on top of the side bar 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Pull side bar out horizontally when removing ae CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping 5 Remove side bar assembly and reattach sport bar Velcro covering 6 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 7 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store in center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 8 Remove the lower windshield
134. arbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 81c8c3de Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escap ing from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never have any smoking materials
135. ard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand 2 Remove one bolt from underside of vehicle mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When ona trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed V
136. ark the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle WARNING e You should not try to start your
137. arts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is
138. ary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate
139. as llle 76 Cellular Phofi 4 24s ry oh ae wee 85 247 Center High Mounted Stop Light 421 Certification Label 0 0 0 0 0c ee eee 346 Chains Tite secasses enea eir phe eo BER SES 333 Changing A Flat Tire llle 368 Chart Tire Sizing es mete 318 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light Child Restraint lees Child Restraint Tether Anchors 458 INDEX MM Child Seat i re aA at ae 67 Climate Control llle 247 Clock osea dk Rx ESSA DET 216 231 234 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 246 Compass EET 210 Compass Calibration soe es 212 Computer Trip Travel liess 209 Console serer eard t Pevqdoe Ona 6 108 Console Floor leen 108 Contract Service qwe pA ede ha ae 449 Cooling System sede dE andrea 392 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 394 Coolant Capacity 6 0 2 eee 422 Coolant Level sen eui ee Eee eee 396 Disposal of Used Coolant 395 Drain Flush and Refill 393 Inspections vaccine ote ein eque aep aea 392 Points to Remember less 396 Pressure Cap Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 393 422 Corrosion Protection 000 ee eee 404 Crise Tight tt ovens see eR REUS 203 Cup Holdet s iia de edad RAE ead OE eee 107 Customer Assistance eee 447 Data Recorder Event 0 0 0 0 eee eens 60 Daytime Running Light
140. atching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn OFF the es STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning thresh old NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is belo
141. ather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others WARNING Service should be obtained as soon as possible Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and CAUTION with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces For correct fluid type refer to Power Steering Reservoir under Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal
142. b 1 4 turn clockwise Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Fog Light 1 Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia and disconnect the electrical connector from underneath 2 Turn the bulb 1 4 turn counterclockwise CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lights 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME eee 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock wise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to rep
143. bility is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 284 STARTING AND OPERATING a OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove two nuts from bodyside 3 Remove side step assembly The Basics of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions h
144. can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Tire Placard Location Two Door Models Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not m been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire Tire Placard Location Four Door Models inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as tion pressure molded into the tire side wall inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even wh
145. careful not to cross thread the screws or over Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the tighten screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE Avisual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up the Soft Top in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP CAUTION e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move to the side E 2 Turn center L shaped locks 2 from center of roof panel 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
146. ce a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position REAR AXLE LOCK 4WD NON RUBICON MODELS IF EQUIPPED The REAR AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower s
147. cle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or de press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have an injury accident Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surfa
148. could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M 4H Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4H and 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4L range or NEUTRAL back to 4H range the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momen tarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off ee STARTING
149. could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the Always wear your seat belts even though you have door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be airbags tween you and the door Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module e Driver Seat Track Position Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner How The Airbag System Works Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors
150. cover or place items on the airbag covers because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued These items may cause serious injury during in flation Do not store or place items under the front seats You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat
151. d 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parki
152. d the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the bre
153. d in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and is inter ested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AQ WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION ME Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the US government notes that the universal use of existing
154. d jacking tools Connect jack handle driver to extension then to lug wrench 4 Operate jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 Jacking Locations 1 Rear Jacking Location 2 Front Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position spare wheel tire on vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten nuts clockwise To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt abou
155. d out of the swing gate brackets 5 Open the swing gate 81b34aa7 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch 81525332 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 10 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 11 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 13 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward the Sunrider package proceed to
156. d the top material so that the plastic retainers form fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the rear a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material portion of the deck into two folds 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 16 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 17 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted disengage Repeat this step on the other side brake lamp Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear door frame 81926dc3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 18 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track 20 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps and lower the top down into the vehicle provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion HE 19 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the eh lose ae mont gader laiches bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion 22 Remove door frames if desired Refer to Door of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle Frame in this section 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top og On No
157. ding interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 81182072 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTI
158. dshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M into the passenger compartment In addition inspect
159. e is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant anti freeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 e Keep the front of the radiat
160. e INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Sectio
161. e UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 5 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the rear door frame Pull the frame towards you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 6 Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location 81924c19 e Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation Four Door Models pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 1 Install the rear door frame first 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield Then clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the f
162. e associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or leasee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airba
163. e down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 15 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 16 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 19 Open the doors and insert the roof retainers into the swing gate brackets channels above the door starting at the front and work ing rearward 81926539 18 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 20 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS their secured position Please visit the owners section of Jeep com for instruc tional videos CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc 81926670 NS If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or
164. e if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s LobocococoOUULDULDLDLT L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires C1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LI Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 138 000
165. e in the ESP disabled mode will seriously affect the vehicles roadworthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control and or accident resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M The following procedure will disable or re enable ESP functionality in the vehicle 1 Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position 2 Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead 3 Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON 4 Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb check 5 Turn and hold the steering wheel one half turn to the right clockwise 6 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 7 Turn the steering wheel back to center and turn and hold an additional one half turn to the left counterclock wise 8 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 9 Turn the steering wheel back to center 10 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 11 Cycle the ignition key to OFF After performing the ESP disable procedure correctly ESP OFF will be displayed in the odometer for approxi mately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON Repeating the ESP disable procedure will re enable nor mal ESP operation ESP BAS Warning Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to t
166. e parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Preparations For Jacking ls 369 H if Your Engine Overheats 366 Jacking Instructions 0 0 H Jacking And Tire Changing 368 WMiJump Starting 0000 Jack Location 64 4223 deca ordei e tu 368 MH Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Spare TireStowage 0 00000 369 Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Hazard Warning Switch Press the switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning Flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With
167. e pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others HSA Hill Start Assist The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only re mains depressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down t
168. e the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heater Only The controls for the heating ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comf
169. e to a complete stop Depress the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into RE VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort es STARTING AND OPERATING 269 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Brake Transmission Interlock System into any forward gear when the engine is above This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out idle speed of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot pressed This system is active only while the ignition is firmly on the brake pedal switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK It i
170. e your vehicle on road with the wind shield down Continued WARNING Continued e Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely fastened either up or down Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to removing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Open sport bar Velcro covering 4 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on bottom side of side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar
171. eadlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 11 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the mas
172. eature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation The windshield wiper washer control lever operates the windshield wipers and washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Move the lever upward to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed operation 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Washer Switch CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from approxi mately one cycle per second to 18 seconds between cycles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then r
173. ecommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary f
174. ecommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the en gine is overheated Do not
175. ed dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light Resolving the problem will turn the Malfunction Indicator Light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states t
176. ed tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tre
177. eded e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a mi mi Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 4
178. edge 11 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 Ensure straps are positioned correctly before pulling a Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm towards the ni rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 4 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 13 To install the side windows affix the window tem properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the upper rear can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm window 14 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 15 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
179. ehicle is dangerous manual The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you r You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Spare Tire Stowage To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 2 Set the parking brake 3 Shift automatic transmission into PARK or manual transmission into REVERSE Turn OFF the ignition 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard warning flashers 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite
180. ehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud and Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 2nd gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic trans mission with the transfer case in the 4L
181. emoval is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps If Equipped e Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 4 Using a rubber mallet carefully tap the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa tion later in this section 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
182. ems SRS This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The front passenger airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are E located inside the driver and front passenger seats and their covers are also labeled SRS 81c74ba2 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment Side Airbag Location 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the objects into occupants causing serious trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured injury Do not
183. en the Electronic Speed Control system is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is on push down and hold SET DECEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Electronic Speed Control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into
184. en they are under inflated 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could
185. eps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 2 Slide the front seat s fully forward 3 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of B pillar ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 Unplug the wiring harness connector 5 Unhook the door strap from the body hook 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M DOOR LOCKS The Vacuum Fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including gATE gAS CAP noFUSE CHANgE OIL or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odom
186. equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly may result in engine damage and may decrease dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be
187. er certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA
188. esume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn off Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multifunction control lever and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator op eration at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever To Activate
189. eter trip odometer mileage NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and console storage Manual Door Locks The front two door models and rear doors four door models are equipped with a rocker type interior door lock To lock the door when leaving your vehicle press the LOCK position and close the door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped The door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch downward to lock the doors and Manual Door Lock upward to unlock the doors WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other c
190. even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System in this section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
191. ey inward all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 3 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition WARNING sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key STEERING WHEEL LOCK Your vehicle is equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do Mei i an not leave the key in the ignition A child could either direction and the key is not in the ignition the operate power windows other controls or move the steering wheel will lock vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the left or right to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to d
192. f all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction
193. faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other th
194. following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid OOC O O M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or Schedule 42 Months Maintenance d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 m m m O O O C 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months
195. fore loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Press
196. fore shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING Continued the way to the floor a
197. four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the m
198. g along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Enhanced Accident Response Feature Maintaining Your Airbag System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically The hazard
199. g put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type CAUTION cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes Improper towing can lead to an injury accident axle engine transmission steering suspension chas Follow these guidelines to make your trailer
200. g system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child
201. ged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing coasting or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual OVERDRIVE For most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled 4th gear Overdrive and will automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e The shift lever is in DRIVE e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Overdrive Off Switch Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console The O D OFF indicator light on the switch will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicator light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature
202. h again To prevent excessive battery drain use the Use care when washing the inside of the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel And Controls 196 WM instrument Cluster 000 197 Bl Instrument Cluster Description 198 ll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 210 Control Buttons 2 0 0 00 002 eee 210 Trip Conditions e cssrosirenir d aiai hu 210 Compass Temperature Display 211 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jaek s ugue Race x URA a Baw A RA Tear 215 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play eeu e d mr RR i Eri Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ccc seepage 9 xk a ea ll AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped
203. h more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Siri
204. h pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with
205. h the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode WATE CE PESTER MRS aU Rane NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio pe OF your madio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Vol trol knob d time tot EEZEDEJEXEILI m die olume control knob a second time to turn mm Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be pusszxz Set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listen
206. hat require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition
207. have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not WARNING spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the authorized dealer for radial tire repairs speed 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves the t
208. he ON position It should go out with the engine running ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP BAS Warning Light comes on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TSC Trailer Sway Conirol TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer
209. he TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be
210. he incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object To avoid this do not apply throttle while depressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on an 8 or greater incline 3 for manual transmission equipped vehicles e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic transmission equipped vehicle and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA on Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL
211. he manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and a
212. he word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touc
213. heel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses se
214. hifting occurs while in this range the O D OFF feature should be selected NOTE Using O D OFF while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips O D Off To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing select the O D OFF feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed
215. ice Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list o
216. icopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The Vacuum Fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word gATE as an indica tion of when the swing gate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the swing gate is not completely closed the VF display will show the word gATE If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE key fob or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle S Saat Gate Handle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting to close the swing gate hard top models only 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se
217. ight not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front s of you Failure to do so could result in an accident O le Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring O Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 3 CC stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for 1 2 mH motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a 4 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and 4 Pin Connector connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park ims 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 3 Cround 6 Right Stop Turn wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent s
218. ights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is located on the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE Atone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft 1 m They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Interior Lights The overhead light will come on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the co
219. indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized opera tion When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visible signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeat edly for three min
220. indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 81caad41 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control Press this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recir culation of the air inside the ve hicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recirculate mode Only use the Recirculate mode 4 to temporarily block out any out 81023332 side odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon ini tial start up in very hot or humid weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculate mode may Air Conditioning make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended Normal Operation Press this button to engage the air conditioning A lamp will illumi nate when the air conditioning system is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera 81caad38 ture control to achieve your de sired interior temperature In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate
221. ine Fuel eere 340 Gasoline Reformulated 340 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 341 Gauges Coolant Temperature essasi ehsa 202 Fuel chs se Gtk ux D 198 Odometer ee eee 205 Speedometer uses co wR aa ae aad 198 Tachometer 0 64 408 ases e ey BE aR eA 202 Gear Ranges e eoe edere teneis Sodas 266 271 General Information llle 17 339 Glass Cleaning 4 95 aa Loud Rar ee ROS 2 407 Gross Axle Weight Rating 347 349 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 347 349 GVWR 3442054 eene tad eR ar ges dans 347 Hands Free Phone UConnect Hard Top 462 INDEX eae Hard Top Modular sil 115 Hard Top Removal 00 00000005 118 Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Head Restraints 2 0 0 00 eee eee eee 89 Head Rests ss oie ge ae he ake RUE wr as 89 Headlights Bulb Replacement a otsani matian ane e 418 Dimmer Switch lt stee rere chrestos restera 97 Replacing 4 i vestem ask aaa ess 418 SWIG 2x ee Eire Ene Ree E Ce T 96 Heater ad bake dera eoe e dina WR dera 247 Heater Engine Block liliis 265 High Beam Indicator 00006 199 Hill Start Assist ssec et RERO e 303 Hitches Trailer Towing 2 6 0 351 Holder Cup ossa creep eoe eae ees 107 Hood Release 1 2 ee ee 94 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid gt se cess iaso 0 00040 401 Ignition cess are eae saree Oe FOR as ie tend
222. ing a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child
223. ing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effect
224. ing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them
225. ing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage
226. ion 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All RKE transmitters that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional RKE transmitters 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed RKE transmitters function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received inclu
227. ions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace accessory drive belt s Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replac
228. ire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions
229. is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins from a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise damage to steering column or shift lever could result Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac tices can overheat and damage the transmission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
230. is will occur even if the message was previously cleared ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only Disabling ESP for Modified Vehicles AWD Models Only Vehicles modified with larger tires and or suspension lifts may experience early ESP activations as compared to a non modified production vehicle depending on lift size tire size suspension changes and or driving habits If early ESP activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle the additional ability to permanently turn off ESP is available A steering wheel ESP button maneuver must be performed to permanently disable ESP and defeat the functionality of the ESP switch Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal ESP operation and restore ESP switch functionality al lowing ESP Partial or Off modes WARNING With ESP in the permanent disable mode enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESP and ERM sys tems is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability This disabled mode is intended for off highway or off road use only Ve hicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicl
231. isengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
232. ission into PARK 10 Apply parking brake 11 Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 12 Release parking brake 13 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the trans fer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to steps 8 9 above Shifting Out Of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Turn the engine off 2 Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 3 Shift transfer case lever into desired position 4 Start the engine 5 Shift automatic transmission into DRIVE or release clutch on manual transmissions NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral on automatic transmission equipped vehicles turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position Th
233. ith emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zo
234. itute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM System will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will f illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the
235. ive only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults be
236. l to remove the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 0 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 Mi Steering Wheel Lock n n annaua anaua 13 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 14 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 WM Senay Key eo co eed ER ERE REREN 14 Replacement Keys 00000 15 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information lesen 17 lll Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 Rearming The System ssssn 18 To Set The Alarm 2 2 2 2 0000000008 18 To Disarm The System 00 0 19 B illuminated Entry i c s eae vans 19 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 19 To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 20 To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 21 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 10 Using The Panic Alarm 21 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 22 Programming Additional RKE Transmitte
237. lace ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends place on the spare tire carrier upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover 1 Remove the spare tire 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate 4 Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 8 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 8 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 13 Quarts 12 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade Spark Plugs 3 8L Engine RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Oil Filter 3 8L Engine M
238. ld restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode ear lier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refe
239. le Break In Period 75 Occupant Restraints 0 0 0 00020 40 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 340 Odometer icc EG ERGO Hae es p 205 THD eme d es do PRAE Y iE 204 205 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 284 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 284 Oil Change Indicator 0000 206 Oil Change Indicator Reset llus 206 Oil Engine iv eret a Re se epus 383 Capacity i esa oe atenti nas dede ot boe 422 Dipstick 0 ii 0 690 56468054 chad deed REY 383 Filet osean ania ERRARE GU RE REA 385 Identification LOGO errem yim 384 Materials Added to 000005 385 Pressure Warning Light 199 Recommendation 384 422 Viscosity fai eae Heeb eke VEER YAR d 384 422 Oil Pressure Light 0000000000 199 Onboard Diagnostic System 380 381 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 84 Overheating Engine 0 0005 203 366 HO 466 INDEX MM Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 451 Paint Care ececvs eec RECHERY E Res 404 Paint Damages s rererere Oh ea ees 404 Panic Alattmn 2er RR Ree dU RR xs 21 Parking Brake exe c er bak Chae wane aE 298 Passing Light idus Vk ee decere s 97 POLS s bem bes Pb REPE eb hs P bu esce 74 Phone Cellular cee eens 85 Phone Hands Free UConnect 85 Placard Ti
240. lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine In addition after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain lit until the ignition switch is turned off e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is upper right side of the instrument panel Do not driven modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does
241. lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options tr
242. long with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured 292 STARTING AND OPERATING M Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving acr
243. loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreez
244. n 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5
245. n Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cance
246. nclud ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M Mirrors ee eneee ai a a E aoe ea 83 Inside Day Night Mirror 83 Outside Mirrors l l esses 84 Bl Hands Free Communication UConnect 85 Seats 525 5 356 EEE TE DI es TEET 86 Front Seat Adjustment 86 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped 05cc0np aloe cong dese RRRES 86 Front Seatback Recline llus 87 Front Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Head Restraints 0000000008 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models vcs i445 ence RR ERR Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models etr es EUR lr Be To Raise The Rear Seat 0005 ll To Open And Close The Hood 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee
247. nd propeller shafts 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator brake ro tors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold we
248. nd hold it there while cranking the e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of have enough power to continue running when the key is this manual for proper jump starting procedures released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel and follow them carefully erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only smoothly If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec ond period
249. nd release the LOCK button on the RKE tranmitter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by DOE repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the LOCK b
250. ndow of the vehicle To Open 1 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side NOTE All plastic retainers must be removed from the door rail prior to the operation of the Sunrider 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the 4 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift windshield frame the top eblozserd 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 6 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form the header on top of the rear portion of the deck a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds Ensure that the straps are securely stowed Se 7 Close the front header latches es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 8 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 8192842d To Close Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle a
251. ne will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the r
252. nel s Installation Front Panel s Installation Only With Rear Hard Top Removed 0 Rear Hard Top Removal Rear Hard Top Installation li DoorFrame us sse eee Door Frame Removal Two Door Models Door Frame Installation Two Door Models Door Frame Removal Four Door Models Door Frame Installation Four Door Models ll Soft Top Two Door Models Folding Down The Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se H Soft Top Four Door Models 151 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Folding Down The Soft Top 154 DatSiustau oy PEU de EU dab 188 Putting Up The Sok Top ccasira niihi kii 164 ll Rear Window Features Hard Top Only 189 Rear Window Wiper Washer ll Sunrider Two Door Models If Equipped 176 TfEquipped csscseesseeceeees 189 ll Sunrider Four Door Models If Equipped 180 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 190 H Folding Windshield 0 0 183 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bats theca esas der Gk boa ed a e dace eed 185 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror
253. nes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to eac
254. never the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seatback is fully latched e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the posi
255. ng brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated positions as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fl
256. ngle vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat seat belt People belted together can crash into one belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions your body These are the strongest parts of your 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and body and take the forces of a collision the best adjust the seat Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch of part of the belt Follow these instructions to plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around sengers safe too your lap Continued another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
257. not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the six to eight second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as thos
258. nsors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indi cator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which
259. nt and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on wet or dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 of this manual 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 50 mph 80 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehi
260. ntrol for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the UN LOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter Also the rear cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off 84913177 Cargo Lamp ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the off detent will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery SORS E SS Rear Cargo Lamp Four Door Models Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this f
261. nutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones
262. o cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if
263. oblems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase wit
264. of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 324 STARTING AND OPERATING M Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Combined Occupant s AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOT
265. of the rear door frames NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door frame tracks and slide the top forward 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 81926dc3 6 Ensure that the top locks into Sunrider locking mecha nisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame 9 Before attaching the header latches be sure the top retainers above the doors do not get trapped between the top and the door frame Also make certain the feet at both ends of the 2 bow forward most bow seat properly on the side bows above the front doors They should 136005925 1 cradle the tubing Finally make sure that the check strap the long woven strap reaching from the rear bow to the 2 bow does not get entangled in any of the framework when unfolding the top gt AUN ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 10 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail
266. omatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel center stack below the radio The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window four door models and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window four door models The switches will continue to function for up to two minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a front door i
267. ompass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference Setting the Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari ance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be ON Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone 15 the values will wrap around to Zone 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Compass Variance Zone Map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about five seconds then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation NOTE The U S Metric display will change from En glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears however it will revert back to its original setting after programming the compass func tions Outside Temperature If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 C the display will show 131 F 55
268. ompass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the ve hicle is in motion Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compass calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the PARK position if equipped If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 1 First enter the variance mode Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approxi mately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR Compass Variance symbol appears 2 The current variance value will also be displayed Once in the variance mode it is necessary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking 3 Manual compass calibration has been initiated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct head ings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in an other area Compass Variance VAR C
269. on discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 48 481 92 119 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 94 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not
270. on monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a indicator check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the indicator is not lit during starting have it serviced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires i
271. ontrols or move the vehicle Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if Power Door Lock Switch 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is WARNING enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle 3 The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK Continued 4 The driver door is opened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Aut
272. or High Speed Operation 328 HSA Hill Start Assist 303 Radial Ply Tires ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 307 Tire Spinning se pete ea ee esee Ra ESP Electronic Stability Program 308 Tread Wear Indicators 330 ESP BAS Warning Light 314 Life Of Tire llle ees 330 TSC Trailer Sway Control 315 Replacement Tires resso su serta erea irs 331 H Tire Safety Information 316 Alignment And Balance 332 Tire Markings ios Ge Bers p woe Bae A a 2316 WE nreClains cen Back Keach ale Betas 333 Tire Identification Number TIN 320 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 333 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 334 W Vehicle Loading 59e r9 eas 346 Bas System 4 esee ea ea OR Blount 337 Certification Lapel spss riren inaari asss 346 General Information 339 WE Trailer Towing 0000 349 la Fuel Requirements aes sque ra ws dae Seg 340 Common Towing Definitions 349 Reformulated Gasoline 340 Trailer Hitch Classification 351 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 341 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehides 341 U i unb GUN eRe dB MM
273. or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition tak
274. or clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system f
275. or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Continued 272 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolon
276. or leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level groun
277. or repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION WARNING It is essential when replacing the cables on the Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants battery that the positive cable is attached to the approved by the manufacturer for your air condi positive post and the negative cable is attached to the tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
278. ort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution as identified by the symbols 81915f2a Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level a Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side x window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Blower Control Use this control center rotary knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O
279. oss an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some thing goes wrong
280. ou start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of B an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If the Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the Electronic Stability Program 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
281. ould be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield And Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the win
282. over in the fresh air and high blower setting This will load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the indicates a problem in the circuit that must be possibility of compressor damage when the system is corrected started again REPLACEMENT BULBS IF EQUIPPED VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Interior Lights Bulb Type batters You miar Auto Trans Indicator Light 658 y y Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 e Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution Heater Control Lights 2 194 Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD Rocker Switch Indicator Light Rear Window Def and Rear Wash Wipe i e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution g f m Da a iai DARUM 912 Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage Bulbs only available from authorized dealer 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights 2 5e RR be 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light 1 L ED Fog Lights eu eX ase m RE 9145 Front Park Turn Lights 2 00 3157 Front Side Marker Lights 2 168 Headlights 2 seses 9 eee Sereas H13 Stop Tail Turn Lights 2 000 3157 Underhood Light sssi cse ms 561 License Light 1 ciu oe beets EE Pees EROS 194 NOTE
283. p Center High Mounted J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window Blue Stop Light CHMSL Green Defogger Switch Stop Lamp J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Feed Pink M2 20Amp Relay Trailer Lighting J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Yellow Stop Green M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Locker J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Yellow _ Relay Yellow Module PCM Trans M4 Range M5 J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain Yellow Yellow Sensor J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Lamp VANITY LP Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow BATT ACC SELECT Red IOD HVAC ATC M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat MW SENSR Under Yellow hood Lamp UH M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If LMP Yellow _ Equipped M12 30Amp Amplifier AMP M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green Yellow Vehicle Entertainment M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw System IOD VES Yellow Cabin Compartment Satellite Digital Audio Node IOD CCN Receiver SDARS Wireless Control DVD Hands Free Module WCM SI Module HFM RA REN Multifunction DIO Antenna ANT Control Switch MUL Universal Garage TIFCTN SW Door Opener M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export UGDO Vanity Yellow Only 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavi
284. place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving Hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 4H Position This range locks the fro
285. plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 9 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers 10 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 3 Attach front of side bar to windshield frame 1 Raise the windshield e Install top two hex bolts 13 mm first then lower side hex bolt 13 mm Lower side bolt will not align until top two bolts are installed 2 Loosely attach rear of side bar to sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section 819292b7 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts e Reattach sport bar Velcro covering ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch
286. provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Compass Calibration The compass on your vehicle will automatically calibrate when new and will continuously adjust itself over the life of the vehicle If the CAL indicator is on or flashing drive slowly under 10 MPH in an open area until the CAL indicator is off NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones IPOD s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions During a short initial period the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished After initial calibration the c
287. r and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Serv
288. r Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the mi
289. r to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A
290. r wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 24 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so the correct mileage can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door indicates that a door s may be ajar gATE if the swing gate is open or ajar
291. r which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals a
292. railer and Tongue Weight 354 Wirihg 2 223 9 9d 9e eaa oe ale ka 359 Trailer Towing Guide 04 352 Trailer Weight 2 os IRR EEG 352 Transfer Case veis c bene eee eae es 402 Four Wheel Drive Operation 274 NENNEN INDEX 471 Maintenance uses ae a Se a s A 402 Transmission AuUlOmal izLidue cede ek de MOREM E 271 Maintenance llle 398 401 Manual mie stage ie uten ace Bon ada Se e 265 Range Indicator i e vec c eai 204 ShifBiig ios eese Sahay oa t Orte scires s 269 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless ENEY ig eke wes Sees paci ose eges eee M 24 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry a ea naa etes martes e epa dur piod 22 Transporting Pets 4 222r eS 74 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0005 330 Trip Computer esp RE e 209 210 Tap Odometer 12223 du pua eee Reg uis 205 Trip Odometer Reset Button 204 Turn Signal lt 2 2 4 062 b Rn 97 199 419 420 UConnect Hands Free Phone 85 Uniform Tire Quality Grades issu 452 Upholstery Care 407 Vehicle Certification Label 346 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading 2 crecer eene 322 346 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 234 9o oer ere ps 255 417 Viscosity Engine Oil 2 6 eee 384 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description Warning Roll Overs cee aaa o x lese
293. railer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for the proper inspection pro cedure 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for proper tire replacement proce dures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You m
294. re A Lists ssec at gage ace 4 RSS als 447 i Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 450 Be Reasonable With Requests 447 W MOPAR Parts seen 450 Bf You Need Assistance e e n 447 Wi Reporting Safety Defects 450 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 448 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 448 ll M E zm D In Mexico Contact ys eacee macei eee a 448 ana paa giac pas eei ee 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bl Publication Order Forms 451 Traction Grades llle 453 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades lesus 453 Quality Grades ig cage ieee tees 452 Teadwea s xut aue ose bos ue See cune 453 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Rea
295. re run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0 261 Manual Transmission llle 261 Automatic Transmission sls 261 Normal Starting 000 261 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or DOSE u dear a de oe dO Gite are die ar a ae 262 If Engine Fails To Start 262 After Starting a4 sag tie he dene chase 264 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 265 ll Manual Transmission lesse Shifting esses Downshifting Reverse Shifting 000 Bl Automatic Transmission Brake Transmission Interlock System Brake Transmission Interlock Manual OVERTIME ic ssa oleae eae dale derer Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ll Four Wheel Drive Operation Command Trac Or Rock Trac Jt BEqupped ies gc kbR OR bI REESE Operating Instructions Precautions Shift Positions eresse rapeseed ankau Shifting Procedure 004 H Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok
296. re and Loading Information 322 Polishing and Waxing 00000 405 Power Doot Locks sus ca eter RA dera eps 33 Steering cedent racist deat Sues 296 297 WindOoWS ies ba eme emet eeu 36 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 49 Preparation for Jacking 06 369 Pretensioners Seat Belis isse 9 x ERG PESE HE 48 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry ise ete RA PLE e RR HR PI 22 Radial Ply Tires s ici races cute eer ees 329 Radio Operation i Sss ieee e dr as Ree 247 Radio Satellite 142242 enea DTI 241 Rear Axle Differential 402 Rear Swing Gate 4k esa edad crea eae ER 38 Rear Window Defroster 20005 190 Rear Window Features llle 189 Rear Wiper Washer ees 189 Rearview Mirrors 0000 eee eee nee 83 Recorder Event Data llle 60 Recreational Towing 0000000 361 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 362 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 363 Reformulated Gasoline sess 340 en INDEX 467 Retrigerant sisir siia che hea SIDES qur aea 388 Release Hood 0 0 ee 94 Reminder Lights On 0000 0 96 Reminder Seat Belt 00 00 00 cee 48 Remote Control Door LOCKS acceso ex et eae ed a 19 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Starting System llle 25 Replacement Bulbs 000000 417 Repl
297. re structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury e Do not driv
298. replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance interval Selection Of Engine Coolant possible Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol base engine cool ant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer r
299. replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To
300. reviously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get slidin
301. rfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Latch Anchorages Two Door Models Latch Anchorages Four Door Models In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 81912914 Sone Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the
302. riving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days MANUAL TRANSMISSION WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal 1 3 5 2 4 6 R Shift Pattern 81cd6226 Shifting Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply en STARTING AN
303. ront of the rear door frame 6 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 7 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners section of Jeep com for instruc tional videos CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax b
304. rs 22 General Information 0 0 0 24 Battery Replacement 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 jo PTT 27 Upper Half Door Window Removal It Equipped ss svetiese ke RR REG 28 Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped sais o mn 28 Front Door Removal 00 28 Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 30 Door Locks ccs as pee ee teres Eaa Bee ese 32 Manual Door Locks esea sa danaa e ae 32 Power Door Locks If Equipped 33 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 34 Automatic Door Locks 35 E Windows aaa aaa aaaea 36 Power Windows If Equipped 36 Rear Power Windows Four Door Models Only 60s steht boat oc e eoa ane al di 38 Wind Buffeting ioc m P RP 38 la Rear Swing Gate a6 cower xar mee n 38 Bl Occupant Restraints 0000008 40 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 41 Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out Four Door Models Only 46 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners lere 48 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert uu quee tace oe RORIS Os 48 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 49 Seat Belt Extender 2205 50 Driver And
305. rs Air Clea nef uu 22 9 deve RAGES 386 Engine OW kena ka ex it eee aa ae 385 Finish Cares oerda Ie rnc ode PAE EK acted 404 Flashers Hazard Warning 2i Lx A ERE das 366 Tuin Signal ike tara aaa ER 199 419 420 Flooded Engine Starting 262 Fluids Capacities iu wae dria a ere eer d 422 Fluid Level Checks 0 0 0 rieres 402 Automatic Transmission 398 Engine Oll cuu cse exe eee nk a Ee a 383 Manual Transmission LL 401 Power Steering 60 0 cece eee eee 297 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 423 Fog Light Service irese ra bead eee RES 420 Fog Lights 2 23 00 e025 suse Sebras ris 97 420 NENNEN INDEX 461 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 20 0 89 Folding Rear Seat 1 2 0 eee eee 92 Folding Windshield lesus 183 Four Wheel Drive eee 274 SMIRNE on hob eee ee RR Ros 276 Four Wheel Drive Operation 274 Four Way Hazard Flasher 366 Front Axle Differential sess 402 DE 340 Filler Cap Gas Cap s excede these ed 344 Gasoline diui es keai peindre eod ede do A S 340 Gauge oesie ceii poten do dabei e 198 Materials Added 0000000 342 Octane Rating sarena aae aia ia AE A 340 Requirements 0 00 422 Tank Capacity 6 6 eee 422 Fuel System Caution 0 0 343 345 USES PCR ET 410 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 344 345 380 Gasol
306. rter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 4 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops 6 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in on the windshield frame 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets 5 Open the swing gate 81b34aa7 158
307. s 97 Dealer Service 0 00 ee eee 383 Defroster Rear Window s 190 Defroster Windshield 248 249 251 Delay Intermittent Wipers 100 Diagnostic System Onboard 380 Dimmer Switch Headlight 97 Dipsticks Oil Engine ac aca dee ees pitani 383 Power Steering eiee eee eee iE eee 297 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 376 Disarming Theft System llle 19 en INDEX 459 Disposal Engine Oil 2 2 ro ako a rac rae 385 Used Coolant Antifreeze leues 395 Door LOCKS sbre e tne 28 RRU4 Severe 32 TOOTS 1 5 c 560s ae qoe oe Bae US BU Oe 27 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 0 000005 87 Driving uada acr dn dees Barada ahs 283 OffPavement llle 284 Off Road ceo Se ee UE RR UR RAD 284 Dual Top 2 2 cnim y CREAR ae PES 109 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 105 Electrical Power Outlets lille 105 Electronic Brake Control System 301 Anti Lock Brake System o n a anaana aaa aaa 301 Brake Assist System 00000005 303 Electronic Roll Mitigation 307 Electronic Stability Program 308 Traction Control System Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 307 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Electronic Stability Program ESP 308 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light
308. s a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS HSA Hill Start Assist Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Program ESP and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must ne
309. s dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 270 STARTING AND OPERATING M Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel above the PARK position 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down 5 Depress the shifter release button and shift into NEU TRAL 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Automatic Transmission with Overdrive Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
310. s of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death en STARTING AND OPERATING 265 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before d
311. s opened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Power Window Switches Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models Only The window lockout switch located between the win dow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for two minutes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Windows Four Door Models Only The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a hel
312. s section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near top of door using a 40 Torx head driver 4 Door Only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver 5 Open swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift rear window glass 81947a57 6 Locate the wiring harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle 7 Disconnect the rear window washer hose and install the tethered cap 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Make sure storage cap is installed to prevent foreign materials from entering washer tube and clogging system and also to prevent fluid from being sprayed into the rear of the vehicle 8 Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and 10 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place on a soft enabling the harness to be disconnected from the hard surface to prevent damage top 9 Close the swing gate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
313. s webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behin
314. seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 TES 8 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a stamped plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE Itis illega
315. sonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to t
316. st parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer OOC O towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS i Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Veliicle ace Discite ORE Gaba d Erat dH ae ass 447 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 449 Prepare For The Appointment 447 Service Contract cca sss ce Res 449 Prepa
317. stened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching Removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provide UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MO PAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggres sively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and
318. t correct this problem See your autho rized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Install chains on rear tires only Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and excessive tire and chain wear e Use chains on P225 75R16 tires only P255 75R17 P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains Install chains snugly and tighten after 0 6 mile 1 km of driving Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and m extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns 334 STARTING AND OPERATING These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road
319. t into position Rear Seat Release 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Subwoofer In a collision you or others in your vehicle could 2 Unplug electrical connector from rear subwoofer if be injured if seats are not properly latched to their equipped floor attachments Always be sure that the seats are fully latched 3 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section 1 Remove the three rear subwoofer if equipped mounting screws using a 130 Torx head driver 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull Replacing the Rear Seat Two Door Models the seat out and away from lower bracket Reverse steps for removing the seat 5 Remove the seat from the vehicle WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the ve hicle
320. t the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING Continued e A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away JUMP STARTING If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water Continued from the vent holes e Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e Do not use a 24 Volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 P
321. tainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Repeat this on the other side 81926670 Es es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 81925914 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Slide the plastic sleeve forward NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels 5 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the material is folded back as shown ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 6 Locate straps to secure side bows Wrap straps around To Close bows as shown Repeat on the other side 1 Remove straps from side bows 2 Unclip and move sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull to the front of the ce vehicle 4 Hook header latches to the loops on the windshield frame close latches and return sun visor s to their original position 5 Slide plastic sleeve rearward over Sunrider link 6 Tuck drip rail retainers into door frame slots 7 Reposition sun visors 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear wi
322. tart will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lights come on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOORS The Vacuum Fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area will display the word door as an indication of a door ajar or not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including gATE gAS CAP noFUSE CHANgE OIL or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed
323. tarting 06 25 Cold Weather spiso edas posni ke 262 Engine Block Heater 205 265 Tachometer saspe remua tni nEn TERE E eee 202 Engine Fails to Start llle 262 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 202 Manual Transmission 261 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Reniote 2440 bed chatted eka es ea RS 25 Theft System Arming estres eaaa manies as 18 Steering Theft System Disarming sssi aa trand nemenia i 19 POWE ad Pe eode hd ru dose s aad 296297 Tilt Steering Column 2 0 0 00 2 ee 101 Tilt Column ius Ha ae ae E 101 Tip Start sesen stand ec ee we ERR d 262 Wheel Lock 4 4 16 yauceease d x3 YR Re 13 Tire and Loading Information Placard 321 322 Wheel DIE 2oi5 saa dogg t pi dee Bea a Geen os 101 Tire Identification Number TIN 320 OLOTape asia dpe escedon dee ide dete 108417 Tire Markings 0 000 000 0008 316 Storage Behind the Seat 109 TireSafety Information 316 Storage Vehicle 2 caw a bee e 255 417 TAPES a zuordnen CANE REE RE 325 452 Storing Your Vehicle 0 0 0 0 ress 417 All Pressure ccs cue sce ddr oce onde teen ie d 326 Sunrider isdem ER RR pde ee 176 180 Alignment and Balance 00 332 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 50 Chains se eos anes ote Bint aes cin elu Oden ci ee 333 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 281 Changing ces aoe
324. tation with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station a a SETUP Button Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B the following items Sports Sports Talk Talk 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt II e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the view
325. ted hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal During off road use loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restore Anti Lock Brake System function WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti Lock Brake Systems ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued en STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones NOTE During severe braking condition
326. ter cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING
327. the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton fy withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM R
328. the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow
329. tion that serves you best 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert
330. tor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Odometer Trip Odometer in the In strument Cluster Description section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as ne
331. touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna c
332. tric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design m standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index und
333. ture between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in b UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Sv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position 81cab396 Temperature Control ae Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale
334. ty Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20Amp COL MOD IR SNS M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Heater Ventilation Red Controller ORC Air Conditioning M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Automatic Tempera Blue Park Lamp LT TAIL ture Control HVAC LIC PRK LMP aoe NUES M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run Cabin Compartment Bie Er P PRK RUN LMP Node CCN Transfer Case Switch T CASE M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down SW RUN ST Multi Natural ASD 1 and 2 Function Control M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment Switch MULTIFTCN Blue Node Interior Light SW Tire Pressure CCN INT LIGHT Monitor TPM Glow Switch Bank SW Plug Module GLW BANK PLG MOD Export M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Diesel Only Yellow ASD 3 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M22 10 Amp _ Right Horn RT M28 10 Amp PCM Feed TCM Red HORN HI LOW Red M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN M29 Red HI LOW M30 15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR Blue 1962 Diagnostic Feed Natural WIPER M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps B U M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Yellow LAMPS Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Pump DSL LIFT Red Controller ORC TT PUMP Export EUROPE ow M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con M26 Red
335. u have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Syst
336. uid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions ha
337. uild up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION Continued WARNING Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up in Section 7 of this manual It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehi cle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result unless side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1
338. uld cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK auto matic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out manual transmission with wheels straight Apply park ing brake on manual transmission vehicle 2 Start the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclock wise from center 4 Press ESP OFF switch four times within twenty sec onds 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that w
339. up and possible tire failure INDEX 456 INDEX MM ABS Anti Lock Brake System 201 299 Adding Fuel 2 002 400 eee ssa eee rae 344 Adding Washer Fluid 0000040 190 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 386 Air Conditioner Maintenance 387 Air Conditioning cin eo ae ee s 250 253 Air Conditioning Controls 253 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 254 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 388 Air Conditioning System 00 253 Air FAO DT 386 Air Pressure Tires 2 2 0 0 0 cece eee 326 Airbag ccs s4 ane cee icsi ae ede EENT Races 50 Airbag Deployment 00 dea tes 57 Airbag Light 0 0 0 0 00 eae 60 201 Airbag Maintenance 00000000 59 Airbag Sid acc cece ganda cee zs 57 Alarm Light 42529232 ce ba weds cae Sle es 202 Alarm Security Alarm Alignment and Balance 04 332 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 243 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 422 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 299 301 Anti Lock Warning Light 201 Appearance Cate a sedora ath boa eo ed dba 404 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Automatic Transmission llus 398 Fluid and Filter Changes 398 Fluid Level Check
340. us service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next
341. used Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS mom Chrysler LLC 81 326 0955 First Edition Printed in U S A
342. uspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E E 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LOCOLDDODCUD Lc Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plo
343. utes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located on the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm system successfully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Security Alarm is set ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm the System
344. utton Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional RKE Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key RKE transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight RKE transmitters can be pro grammed for your vehicle Additional RKE transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed RKE transmitter NOTE When entering the program mode using that RKE transmitter all other programmed RKE transmitters will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle If the vehicle is not equipped with a Sentry Key use the following procedure to program additional RKE trans mitters 1 Enter the vehicle and close all of the doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the ignition key into the ignit
345. ve your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action Following off road usage completely inspect the under body of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts Check air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud or debris and clean as required A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal
346. ver be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brak
347. w the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 340 STARTING AND OPERATING M The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States oa ota eed e DRE KR55120123 Canada iura ertereee4 pen vase 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un soodiabs leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasoline and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause
348. wing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends ooo and boot seals replace if necessary 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the ignition cables Replace the spark plugs Flush and replace the engine coolant 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road condit
349. wing trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more t7hen 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 m m m ooo 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front s
350. witch bank below the climate controls This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the REAR AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the switch up to unlock the rear axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the electronic control SWAY BAR switch located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Sway Bar Switch Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions WA
351. y Entry Lever the track locks ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE e The front passenger seats have a full recliner memory which will allow the seatback to be returned to its original position e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position e The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary high as practical The front head restraints have a locking to reposition the front seats button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button The rear head restraints are not adjustable Adjustable Head Restraints Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold seatback for ward Folding Rear Seat 3 Return the seat to its normal position 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and firmly lock sea
352. y of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue It typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring lo
353. you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 332 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer sion components You could lose control and have readings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped e Fast tire wear on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Vehicle pull to right or left Alignment and Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Alignment will no
354. ystem checked immediately The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items p

2009 Jeep JK Wrangler OM - Muddy Buddys Jeep Wrangler Club

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents